Chevrolet 2007 manual

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7 Front Seats .............................................. 9 Rear Seats ............................................. 19 Safety Belts ............................................ 38 Child Restraints ...................................... 61 Airbag System ........................................ 90 Restraint System Check ....................... 10 8 Features and Controls .............................. 11 1 Keys ..................................................... 11 3 Doors and Locks .................................. 12 2 Windows ............................................... 13 2 Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 13 5 Sta[...]

Headlamp Aiming ................................. 49 9 Bulb Replacement ................................ 502 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..................................... 50 5 Tires ..................................................... 50 7 Appearance Care .................................. 5 53 Vehicle Identification ............................. 5 62 Electrical System .................................. 5 63 Capacities and Specifications ................ 5 72 Maintenance Schedule .............................. 57 5 Maintenance Schedule .......................... 57 6 Customer Assistance Information ............. 59 7 Customer Assistance and Information ..... 5 98 Reporting Safe[...]

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the names TAHOE, SUBURBAN, and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. This manual describes features that may be available in this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For example, more than one entertainment system may be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered without [...]

How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things. Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. { CAUTION: These mean the[...]

Vehicle Damage Warnings Also, in this manual you will find these notices: Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text desc[...]

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle: 6[...]

Front Seats ..................................................... 9 Manual Seats ................................................ 9 Power Seats ............................................... 10 Power Lumbar ............................................. 11 Heated Seats .............................................. 12 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 13 Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15 Head Restraints .......................................... 18 Center Seat ................................................ 1 9 Rear Seats .................................................... 19 Heated Seats .............................................. 19 60/40 Split [...]

Airbag System .............................................. 9 0 Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 9 3 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 9 6 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 98 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 99 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ................................................... 99 Passenger Sensing System ....................... 10 1 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 10 6 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 10 7 Restraint System Check ............................. 10 8 Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 108 Replacing Restraint Syst[...]

Front Seats Manual Seats { CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. To move a manual seat forward or rearward: 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. 9[...]

Power Seats On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats. To adjust the seat, do any of the following: • Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Re[...]

Power Lumbar If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. • To increase lumbar support, press and hold the front of the control. • To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the rear of the control. • To raise the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. • To lower the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support. Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for more informa[...]

Heated Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are located on the driver’s and passenger’s doors, near the door handle. I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seatback. The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn the heat to the seatback off. Indicator lights below the button show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seat and seatback. The light on the button will come on to indicate that the feature is working. Pr[...]

Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals Your vehicle may have the memory package. The controls for this feature are located on the driver’s door panel, and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver’s seat, outside mirrors, and the adjustable throttle and brake pedal. To save your positions in memory, do the following: 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 170 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 143 for more information. Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and recall their positions. Not all adjustable [...]

To stop recall movement of the memory function at any time, press one of the power seat controls, memory buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal switch. If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction and press the appropriate control for the area that is not responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button. If the memory position is still not recalling, see your dealer for service. Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the drive[...]

Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks { CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat(s). To recline the seatback, do the fol[...]

To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. • To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. • To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. 16[...]

{ CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. 17[...]

Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint, press the release button (A), located on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. The front seats may have head restraints that also tilt forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint, grasp the top of the restraint while pressing the button (B), located on the inboard side of the head restraint, and move it forward or rearward until the desired locking position is reached. Try to move the head restraint [...]

Center Seat Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the driver and passenger when the center seat is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down. For information on safety belts for this position, see Center Front Passenger Position on page 53 . Rear Seats Heated Seats If the rear seats have the heated seat feature, the buttons used to control this feature are located on the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) panel. M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion, press the button with the heated seat symbol. A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display to indicate that the feature is on. Press the [...]

Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds after the ignition is turned off. If the vehicle is restarted, the heated seat button will need to be pressed again to restart the feature. 60/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seat(s) can be folded for additional cargo space or folded and tumbled for easy entry and exit to the third row seats, if your vehicle has them. These seats will have either the manual fold and tumble feature or the automatic seat release fold and tumble feature. Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and [...]

The seatback will fold forward automatically. Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor. If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the upright position. 3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. 21[...]

Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the [...]

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your vehicle has them, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before [...]

Automatic Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature to work. Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) { CAUTION: Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button. To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position befo[...]

Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the [...]

Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or Outside { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if your vehicle has them, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their nor[...]

Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback, do the following: 1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 2. Push and pull on the se[...]

Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the seat, to release the seatback. The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor. If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the upr[...]

3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 29[...]

Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if your vehicle has them, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position be[...]

Automatic Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature to work. Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) { CAUTION: Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button. To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position befo[...]

Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or Outside { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, [...]

2. Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors. One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat. Third Row Seat If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled, or removed from the vehicle. Folding the Seatback(s) To fold the seatback, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Remove all items on the seat cushion. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. [...]

Unfolding the Seatback(s) To return the seatback to the upright position, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position. { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Tumbling the Third Row Seat The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo space. To tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Make sure the head rests are[...]

6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place. 7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked. Put the seat in this position only when necessary for additional cargo space. Returning the Third Row Seat from a Tumbled Position To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Make sure there is nothing that could become trapped under the seat. 3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle at the bottom rear of the seat. 4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor.[...]

3. Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling the carrying handle, located at the rear of the seat, rearward. 4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track in the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle. Installing the Third Row Seat To install the seat, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle. 2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on the floor and roll the seat forward. The front latches should lock into place. If the latches do not lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward slightly. 3. Lower the rear of the seat and push down on the seat to engage the rear floor latches. { CAUTION: A seat that is not locked into pl[...]

{ CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. 6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. 7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the original position over the seatbacks. 37[...]

Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. { CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. { CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outs[...]

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot! Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 39[...]

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 40[...]

The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... or the instrument panel... 41[...]

or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are suppl[...]

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an accident — even one that is not your fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rul[...]

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 60 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment [...]

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. 45[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. 46[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 47[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. 48[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. 49[...]

Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. 50[...]

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. To move it down, squeeze the buttons (A) on the sides of the heigh[...]

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt prop[...]

Center Front Passenger Position Lap Belt Your vehicle may have a center front seating position. When you sit in the center front seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 60 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 53[...]

Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Lap-Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then p[...]

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 60 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder part. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal i[...]

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head. 56[...]

There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the second row seat and the third row, if your vehicle has one. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt: 1. For the second row, remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body. If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat. Second Row Third Row 57[...]

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 58[...]

{ CAUTION: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 54 . Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide. Slide the guide into its storage clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat. 59[...]

Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger. Although you cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event. Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts [...]

Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. According to [...]

{ CAUTION: Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time. Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the second row center position, move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in[...]

{ CAUTION: Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. 63[...]

Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they [...]

{ CAUTION: People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint. 65[...]

{ CAUTION: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. 66[...]

Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s ins[...]

{ CAUTION: The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or p[...]

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. 69[...]

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Wit[...]

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in the Vehicle { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 74 for more in[...]

Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if th[...]

CAUTION: (Continued) This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child [...]

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system. Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly[...]

Top Tether Anchor A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forwar[...]

Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. Second Row — 60/40 Second Row — Bucket Third Row — Two Passenger 76[...]

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. For models with a three passenger third row seat, see the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one. Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor. For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear right side passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For models with second row bucket seats, both rear seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For models with bucket second row seating,[...]

For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat, there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver side seating position in the third row. Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor. For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat, there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can [...]

Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger position or the third row passenger side seating position if your vehicle has a third row seat, if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. There is no place to attach the top tether in these positions. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { CAUTION: If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, t[...]

{ CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed. Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer. Notice: Contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact bet[...]

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions: If the position you are using does not have a head rest/restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using does not have a head rest/restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using has an[...]

If the position you are using has an adjustable head rest/restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the head rest/restraint and route the tether under the head rest/restraint and in between the head rest/restraint posts. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 74 . If your vehicle has a third row, there is no top tether anchor in the passenger-side seating position. Do not secure a child restraint in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or [...]

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 83[...]

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends using a top tether, and the position that you are using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 74 . 7. Push and pull the child restraint in[...]

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position { CAUTION: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints will not work properly. Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 72 . In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing sy[...]

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even th[...]

There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 74 if the child restraint has a top tether. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing[...]

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 88[...]

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the lock has been set. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 8. If the airbag is off, the of f indicator will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or START. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, [...]

Airbag System Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted rollover airbags designed for either side impact or rollover deployment. Roof-mounted rollover airbags are available for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver and for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind that passenger. If your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the ceiling above the sidewall trim near the driver’s and right front passenger’s window and the second row outside seating positions. Also, if your vehicle has [...]

CAUTION: (Continued) They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past. Roof-mounted rollover airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal impact. They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes. If your vehicle has roof-mounted airbags, they are designed to provide both side impact protection and rollover protection. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether o[...]

{ CAUTION: Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 61 or Infants and Young Children on page 64 . Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door in the first or second row seats, or the rear windows in the third row seat, if your vehicle has roof-[...]

Where Are the Airbags? The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel. The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. 93[...]

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag for the driver and the person seated directly behind the driver, it is located in the ceiling above the side windows. If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag for the right front passenger and the person directly behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling above the side windows. 94[...]

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag and a third row passenger seat, the airbag is located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outside passenger positions in the third row. { CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags, never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by rout[...]

When Should an Airbag Inflate? The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows[...]

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object. • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. Frontal air[...]

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-mounted rollover airbags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact or a rollover event. The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road Driving on page 372 for tips on off-road driving. What Makes an[...]

How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help you in[...]

Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle. { CAUTION: When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. Your vehicle has a feature [...]

Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The passenger airbag status indicator on the overhead console will be visible when you turn your ignition key to RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 246 . The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with senso[...]

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee t[...]

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints • Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger’s airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 85 . If, after reinstall[...]

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s airbag. 104[...]

{ CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light on page 245 for more on this, including important safety information. Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 107 for more inform[...]

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 616 . { CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are pro[...]

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Also, the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedur[...]

Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety Belts on page 556 for more information. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag[...]

Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH system parts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts. If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, you[...]

✍ NOTES 110[...]

Keys ............................................................ 11 3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 11 4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation ............................................... 11 5 Doors and Locks ........................................ 12 2 Door Locks ................................................ 12 2 Power Door Locks ..................................... 12 3 Delayed Locking ........................................ 12 3 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 12 3 Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 12 4 Lockout Protection ..................................... 12 4 Liftgate/Liftglass ......................................... 12 5 Pow[...]

Mirrors ......................................................... 16 2 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® , Compass and Temperature Display .............................. 16 2 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display ......... 16 6 Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 16 8 Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 16 9 Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 1 70 Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 17 1 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............. 17 2 Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors .............. 17 2 Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 17 3 Outside Heated Mirrors ...........[...]

Keys { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. 113[...]

Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignition, all door locks, and the spare tire hoist lock, if your vehicle has one. If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining replacements. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 604 . Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part[...]

At times you may notice a decrease in operating range. This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: • Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. • Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115 . • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/r[...]

The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE system: / (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this feature, it may be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” following for more detailed information. Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280 for additional information. Pre[...]

m (Liftglass): Press and hold this button on the RKE transmitter to open the liftglass. & (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this button on the RKE transmitter to open and close the liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound three times. Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or the alarm button [...]

Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in the RKE transmitter should last about four years. The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably time to change the battery. The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the RKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for additional information. Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. To r[...]

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the positive side of the battery facing down. Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water will not get in. 4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter together. 5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the vehicle. Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger. Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the RUN position. During a remote start, if your vehicle has an [...]

/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock button and then press and hold the remote start button to start the vehicle. To start the vehicle using the remote start feature, do the following: 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. 2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote start button for at least four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn off the ignition. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain [...]

Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be started with the key. After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again. The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an emission control system malfunction. Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil pressure gets low. Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START?[...]

Doors and Locks Door Locks { CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. • Outsiders can easily enter through [...]

Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the armrest on the front doors. K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to unlock the doors. Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock the doors. Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch or the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the[...]

Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to access them. The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock. To set the locks, do the following: 1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position. 2. Close the door. When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the following: 1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power door lock switch, or by lifting t[...]

If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is pressed when the front passenger’s door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger’s door will unlock. Liftgate/Liftglass { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open, or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftglass or liftgate: • Make sure all other windows are [...]

To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or press the door unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115 . To open the liftglass, press the button on the underside of the license pocket applique (A). The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the liftglass release button on the RKE. To open the entire liftgate, press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle (B). The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid. The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgat[...]

Power Liftgate Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to power open or close the liftgate. The liftgate must be completely closed to power open or completely open to power close. The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at the beginning of each power operation cycle. { CAUTION: You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing. Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could break the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area above the liftgate is clear before [...]

The liftgate can be power closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation. The power liftgate my be temporarily disabled under extreme high or low temperatures. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. The power liftgate may not operate under low battery conditions. If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could[...]

Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the full closed or open position. After removing the obstruction, the liftgate may be power opened or closed normally. If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle, the power function will deactivate, and the liftgate will switch to manual operation. The REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After removing the obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the full open position or close the liftgate to the fully[...]

It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open, however, if you must drive with the liftgate open, the power liftgate should be switched to manual liftgate operation — the overhead console switch set to the “Disable” position. Both the liftglass and liftgate have an electric latch. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, the liftglass and liftgate will not open. The liftglass and liftgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected and charged. If the battery is properly connected and has adequate voltage, and the liftgate or liftglass still will not function, your vehicle should be taken to a dealership for service. { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to d[...]

Power Running Boards Your vehicle may have power running boards. The power running boards automatically extend from beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has been opened. Once the door is closed, the running boards will automatically move back under the vehicle. The vehicle must not be moving for the running boards to extend or retract. The switch used to disable the power running boards is located on the center console below the climate control system. The running boards cannot be disabled in the extended position. 131[...]

Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 132[...]

Power Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome from extreme heat in warm or hot weather and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continue[...]

The driver’s door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows. The power windows work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 141 . Press the switch to lower the window. Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the window. Express-Down Windows The driver and front passenger windows have an express-down feature that allows the windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully on the window switch, then release, to activate the express-down mode. The express-down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the front edge of the switch. Wi[...]

Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. Content Theft-Deterrent Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm system. To activate the theft-deterrent system, do the following: 1. Open the door. 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The security light should come on and flash. The door does not need to be open. If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm will not be activated until all doors are closed and the security light goes off. 3. Close all doors. The security light will [...]

The theft-deterrent system will not activate if you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock, or the power door lock switch. It activates only if you use the RKE transmitter. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident: • If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed. • Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed. If you set off the alarm by accident, turn of f the alarm by pressing u[...]

PASS-Key ® III+ The PASS-Key ® III+ system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the de[...]

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 564 . If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key ® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. It is possible for the PASS-Key ® III+ decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The following procedure is for programming additional keys only. If all[...]

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break-In Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle. • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every [...]

Ignition Positions Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different positions. A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to LOCK. Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off[...]

Key In the Ignition Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always remember to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission. Also, always remember to lock the doors. The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an extended period of time. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow cer[...]

If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY or LOCK position. Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds, especially in very [...]

Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot move farther away from the standard position, but can move toward the driver for better pedal reach. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away from your body. No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while using the cruise control. Your vehicle may[...]

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. { CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and stor[...]

Active Fuel Management™ Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel Management™. This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending on the driving conditions. When less power is required, such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achieve better fuel economy. When greater power demands are required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain full-cylinder operation. Your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™ indicator. For more information on using this display see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on[...]

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle cannot move easily. { CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 157 .I fy o u are pulling a trailer, se[...]

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle is being towed. { CAUTION: Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engin[...]

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed even more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. If you select SECOND (2) and the Tow/Haul has not been selected, the transmission will drive in SECOND (2) gear. You may use this feature for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces. If you select SECOND (2) and the Tow/Haul has also been selected, the transmission operation will be limited to FIRST (1) and SECOND (2) gears. You may use this feature for reduc[...]

Tow/Haul Mode Your vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector button is located on the end of the column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load or if there is a need to charge a battery installed in a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 422 for more information. When Tow/Haul mode is selected the Tow/Haul indicator light will come on. The Tow/Haul mode works with the Autoride ® feature, if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride ® on page 422 . 149[...]

Four-Wheel Drive If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. Read the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time. While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering system. Front Axle Locking Feature The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transf[...]

You can choose among five driving settings: Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. Fast flashing means the conditions were not met to make the desired shift, typically the vehicle was going too fast, the automatic transmission was not in neutral, or the clutch pedal was not fully pressed. Slow flashing means the shift is in progress. It will stay on when the shift is completed. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a[...]

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills. StabiliTrak ® will not engage in this mode. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 363 for more information. { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 15[...]

Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this section for more information. Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain. To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your veh[...]

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your transmission into gear. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four-Wheel Driv[...]

6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for 10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the four low position. The NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete. 7. If the engine is running, verify that the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second. 8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will turn the engine off. 9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P). 10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Shifting Out of NEUTRAL To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following: [...]

Parking Brake To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot. A chime will activate and the warning light will flash when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph (8 km/h). To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located above the parking brake pedal, with the parking brake symbol, to release the parking brake. If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage[...]

Shifting Into Park (P) { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 422 . 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your[...]

Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine runnin[...]

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). Shifting Out of Park (P) Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 145 . If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake a[...]

Engine Exhaust { CAUTION: Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: • The exhaust system sounds strange or different. • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. • Repairs were not done correctly. • Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: • Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; [...]

Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. { CAUTION: Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle. See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 160 . Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See Winter Driving on page 400 . { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to ge[...]

{ CAUTION: Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. Always set the parking brake. Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 157 . If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 422 . Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® , Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. The mirror has a dual display in the upper rig[...]

Temperature and Compass Display Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly to turn the compass/temperature display on or off. If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to be calibrated. For more information, see “Compass Calibration” following. To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the following: 1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears. 2. Press the button again to change the display to the desired unit of measurement. After approximately four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return. If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for a[...]

Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs: • After approximately five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading, N for North, for example, there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. • The compass does not display the correct heading and the compass zone variance is set correctly. In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is displayed. The compass can be calibrated by driving [...]

To adjust for compass variance, do the following: 1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 2. Press and hold the on/off button unti laZa n d a zone number appears in the display. The compass is now in zone mode. 3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired zone number appears in the display. Release the button. After approximately four seconds of inactivity, the new zone number will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return. Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to [...]

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass and Temperature Display Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on, an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark. The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and the outside temperature. Y b : Briefly press this button to turn the display on or off. Temperature Display The temperature can be displayed by pressing the compass/temperature button. Pressing the compass/temperature button once briefly, will toggle the display reading on and off. To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and ho[...]

Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation O : Press this button to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The indicator light to the left of the button will turn on to indicate when the feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted. Compass Operation Press the compass/temperature button once briefly to turn the display on or off. Compass Calibration The compass may need calibration if one of the following occurs: • If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle. • After approximately five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading, N for North, for example, there may be a strong magnetic field[...]

To adjust for compass variance: 1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 2. Press and hold the compass/temperature button for six seconds until a zone number appears in the display. 3. Press the compass/temperature button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressing the button, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Cleaning the Mirror Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Outside Manual Mirrors Adjust your outside mirrors so yo[...]

Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors If your vehicle has trailer towing type mirrors, they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of the objects behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer. These mirrors can be manually folded forward or rearward. The lower portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver’s preferred position for better vision. Your vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice. When the rear window defogger button is pressed, the heated mirrors are[...]

Outside Power Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with outside power mirrors, the controls are located on the driver’s door armrest. Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror or (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. To adjust each mirror, press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle. The mirrors may also include a memory function that works with the memory seats. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for more information. The mirrors can be manua[...]

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors If your vehicle is equipped with outside power foldaway mirrors, the controls are located on the driver’s door armrest. • Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then press the arrows located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again to deselect this mirror. • Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror. Then press the arrows located on the four-way control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again to deselect this mirror. • Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. • Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually, they may shake [...]

Turn Signal Indicator Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. Ground Illumination Lamps The mirrors may also include ground illumination lamps in the base of the mirror. These lamps help you see the area near the base of the front doors when it is dark out. Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off settings found on the electrochromic inside mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar ® , Compass and Temperature Disp[...]

Outside Convex Mirror Your passenger’s side mirror may have convex glass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. { CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Outside Heated Mirrors The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice. When the rear window defogger button is pressed, the heated mirrors are also turned on. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Contro[...]

OnStar ® service is provided to you subject to the OnStar ® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar ® service at any time by contacting OnStar ® as provided below. A complete OnStar ® Owners Guide and the OnStar ® Terms and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar ® Subscriber glove box literature. For more information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar ® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar ® button to speak with an OnStar ® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Not all OnStar ® features are available on all vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the services described below, or for a full [...]

Available Services included with Directions & Connections ® Plan • All Safe and Sound Plan Services • Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar ® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) • RideAssist • Information and Convenience Services OnStar ® Hands-Free Calling OnStar ® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar ® subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar ® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the[...]

How OnStar ® Service Works In order to provide you with OnStar ® services, your vehicle’s OnStar ® system has the capability of recording and transmitting vehicle information. This information is automatically sent to an OnStar ® Call Center at the time of an OnStar ® button press, Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional information regarding the accident that your vehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar ® Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends OnStar ® your GPS[...]

Universal Home Remote System System Identification Your vehicle may have a Universal Home Remote System. Determine which Universal Home Remote your vehicle has and then read the pages following for instructions on programming your specific system. If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator light above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation (With One Triangular LED). If there are three round LED indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions under Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED). For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, ca[...]

Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home lighting. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference [...]

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in section. When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming. It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. Programming the Universal Home Remote [...]

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons. 5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home Remote button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on continuously, programming is complete and your device should activate when the Universal Home Remote button is pressed and released. To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two [...]

Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. If you live in Canada, or you are having diff iculty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the following: Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote button while you press and rele[...]

Reprogramming a Single Universal Home Remote Button To program a device to Universal Home Remote using a Universal Home Remote button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home Remote button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. While still holding the Universal Home Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in this section. For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Of fices on page 602 . Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) Your vehicle[...]

Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter. Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming. You only need the original remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be er[...]

Follow these steps to program up to three devices: 1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them. 2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit and may be a colored button. Press this button. After you press this button, you will have 30 seconds to complete the following steps. 184[...]

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold the universal home remote button that you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light, above the selected button, should slowly blink. You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds. 4. Immediately, within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 5. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation de[...]

Follow these steps to program up to three devices: 1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door opener, remove the battery cover on your hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code. Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions 186[...]

Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar. The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter may be labeled, as follows: • A switch in the up position may be labeled as “Up,” “+,” or “On.” • A switch in the down position may be labeled as “Down,” “ − ,” or “Of f.” • A switch in the middle position may be labeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.” 2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows: • When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.” • When a switch is in the down position, write “Right.” • If a switch is set between the up and down[...]

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s Universal Home Remote. You will have two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows: • If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the vehicle. • If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the vehicle. • If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in the vehicle. 5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on. 6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garag[...]

Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions. Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell or terminate your lease. To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device, do the following: 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lights, located directly above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly. 2. Once the indicator[...]

Storage Areas Glove Box Open the glove box by pulling up on the bottom of the handle. Cupholder(s) Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front and rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest. The front cupholders can be adjusted by moving the insert forward or rearward. You may also have cupholders in the second and third row seat armrest areas. To access the cupholders in the rear floor console, pull downward on the lid. Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle may have a console compartment with cupholders between the bucket seats. To open it, press the button and lift the console lid open. The rear of the console has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat pas[...]

Luggage Carrier The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can be used to load things on top of the vehicle. The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof. It may also have crossrails which can be moved back and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports. Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity a[...]

Rear Storage Area Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s side trim panel. To open the utility compartment, turn the knobs and swing the compartment door open. The compartment door can be removed. Rear Seat Armrest Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat armrest. Pull the loop at the top of the armrest down to access the cupholders. Cargo Cover { CAUTION: An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. If you remove the cover, always store it in the proper storage location. When you put it back, always be sure that it is securely [...]

To return the cover to the retracted position, do the following: 1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover posts from the retaining sockets. 2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted position. To remove the cover, from a regular wheelbase model, do the following: 1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder. 2. Then, grasping the driver’s side cover end cap, push the cover end cap toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle. 3. Swing the cover rearward and take it out of the vehicle. To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following: 1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down. 2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and p[...]

Cargo Tie Downs Your vehicle may have cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside the vehicle. Cargo Management System Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo management system. It can be used for storing and separating cargo and as a table. The maximum load is 200 lbs. (91 kg) distributed. It is located in the rear of the vehicle on upper or lower horizontal guides. There are two vertical curved guides that connect the upper and lower horizontal guides together. The system has three rollers on each side. The system has a release lever located in the center of the grab handle. This will engage and disengage a locator pin. This is u[...]

4. Lower the system until the middle rollers are lined up with lower guides. While holding in the release lever, push the system forward until all three sets of rollers are on the guides. 5. Release the lever and push the system until the locator pin reaches the locator hole. To adjust the system from the lower position to the upper position, do the following: 1. Squeeze and hold the release lever to retract the locator pin. 2. Pull the system back and lift until the middle rollers can be placed into the upper guides. 3. Push the system forward until the front rollers are lined up with the vertical curved guides. 4. Push down on the rear of the system and raise the front rollers up the verti[...]

On one side of the system is a retractable storage area. To access, pull the handle in the center of the system up. Slide the hinge covers to the center of each side. This will keep the sides of the storage system stationary and allow it to stay upright. Inside the system are two removable dividers. To remove, unhook the loops at the ends of each divider. When not in use, slide the hinge covers back and the storage system will fold back down. Press down on the storage cover to lock it into place. To utilize the cupholders, follow the procedure for removing the system from the vehicle. 196[...]

Sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs to be turned to ON, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 141 for more information. There are two switches in the overhead console that operate the sunroof. Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side switch until the sunroof reach[...]

Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will close automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened manually. The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side switch a second time to op[...]

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 2 02 Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 20 4 Other Warning Devices ............................. 2 04 Horn .......................................................... 20 4 Tilt Wheel .................................................. 20 4 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 20 5 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 20 6 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 20 7 Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 20 7 Windshield Wipers ..................................... 20 7 Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 20 8 Windshield Washer .................................... [...]

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 24 2 Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 243 Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 24 4 Trip Odometer ........................................... 244 Tachometer ............................................... 24 4 Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 24 4 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 245 Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 2 45 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 246 Charging System Light .............................. 24 8 Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 249 Brake System Warning Light ..................... 24 9 Anti-Lock Brake System War[...]

Audio System(s) ......................................... 29 0 Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a Single CD Player) ............................... 29 1 Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a CD and DVD Player) .......................... 29 2 Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player) ............................ 2 93 Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 294 Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) ................. 3 05 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 32 1 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD Player) .................................... 32 7 XM Radio Messages .. ............................... 3 35 Navigation/Radio System ........[...]

Instrument Panel Overview United States version shown; Canada similar 202[...]

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 238 . B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 205 . C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 243 . D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 204 . E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 145 . F. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 149 . G. Driver Information Center Controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 260 . H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 290 . I. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on page 215 . J. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp Override on page 219 . K. Au[...]

Hazard Warning Flashers The hazard warning flashers warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of the steering column. The hazard warning flashers work no matter what ignition position the key is in, and even if the key is not in the ignition. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals will not work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet [...]

The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left side of the column. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G (Turn and Lane Change Signals): See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 206 . 53 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer): See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 207 . Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 207 . N (Windshield Wipers): See Windshield Wipers on page 207 . 205[...]

L (Windshield Washer): See Windshield Washer on page 209 . 5 (Rear Wiper Delay): See Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 210 . Z (Rear Wiper): See Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 210 . = (Rear Wiper Wash): See Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 210 . Turn and Lane-Change Signals The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change. To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash. This will cause the turn signals to automatically [...]

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on. Flash-to-Pass This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic position. To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then release it. If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn [...]

The windshield wipers are controlled by turning the band with the wiper symbol. 8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for more wipe cycles. 9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off. 6 (Delay): The wiper speed can be set for a long or short delay between wiping cycles. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay. 6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you to the first solid band past the delay settings, for steady wiping at low speed. 1 (High Spee[...]

The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency of the wipes from the off setting to the high speed setting according to the weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining. When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position. Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash. Windshield Washer { CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. L (Washer Fluid): Ther[...]

The button is located in the switchbank under the climate controls. Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer fluid system. The indicator light will flash. This activation will initiate four heated wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed. When the heated windshield washer fluid system is activated under certain outsi[...]

= (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiper wash, push the button on the end of the turn signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold the button. The rear window wiper/washer will not operate if the liftgate or liftglass is open or ajar. If the liftgate or liftglass is opened while the rear wiper is on, the wiper will return to the parked position and stop. Cruise Control { CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traff ic. Cruise[...]

If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak ® system and begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 363 . When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on. The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel. T (On/Off): This button can both activate and turn off the system. The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is of f. + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed. SET − (Set/Coast): Press this but[...]

Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. { CAUTION: If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. 1. Press the cruise control On/Off button. 2. Get up to the desired speed. 3. Press the SET − button located on the steering wheel and release it. 4. Take your foot off t[...]

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce your speed while using cruise control: • Press and hold the SET– button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it. • To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load, and the st[...]

Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. It controls the following systems: • Headlamps • Taillamps • Parking Lamps • License Plate Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions: 9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work for vehicles that are shifted into the PARK (P) position. AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to automatica[...]

A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on. • Parking Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps Headlamps on Reminder A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is off and a door is open. To disable the chime, turn the light off. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime [...]

Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp system will turn on the headlamps at the normal brightness, along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim. To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transaxle must be in the PARK (P) position, before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off. The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates when the automatic headlamps turn on. Be sure it is not covered, or the h[...]

Fog Lamps - (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps, the button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column and below the dome lamp override button. The ignition must be in RUN and the parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work. To turn the fog lamps on, press the fog lamps button. A light comes on in the instrument panel cluster to let you know that the fog lamps are on. Press the button again to turn the fog lamps off. When the fog lamps are turned on, the low-beam headlamps automatically turn on. The fog lamps turn off while you change to high-beam headlamps. When the high-beam headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come on again. Fog lamps should only b[...]

For further information on roof mount emergency lamp installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer. If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may have the snow plow prep package. For further information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 412 . Instrument Panel Brightness D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. The knob for this feature is located next to the headlamp control. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights. Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrument panel cluster or radio display to f[...]

Entry Lighting Your vehicle has an illuminated entry feature. When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the extended position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will not come on. Exit Lighting With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when the key is removed from the ignition. They will turn off automatically in 20 seconds. The lights will not come on if the dome override button is pressed in. Reading Lamps If your vehicle has reading lamps they are located on the overhead console. To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button again. Your vehicle may also[...]

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads. A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle [...]

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system it is designed to help you park while in Reverse (R). It operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helps make parking easier and helps you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The URPA system detects objects that are close to the rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk level. The system detects objects up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPA sensors determine how close these objects are from your bumper within this area. { CAUTION: The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA) system does not rep[...]

The URPA display is located near the passenger side rear window and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder. The URPA display has three color-coded lights. The lights are used to provide distance and system information, along with beeps that will be heard through the speakers. URPA can be turned off by pressing the rear park aid disable button located next to the radio. The indicator light will come on to indicate that URPA is off. The red light in the URPA display will also be lit if the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), PARKING ASSIST OFF will display on the screen. URPA automatically turns back on each time the vehicle is started. How[...]

How the System Works when Backing If the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detects objects close to the rear bumper. The first time an object is detected a single beep will sound. If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), the following describes what will occur based on your distance to a detected object located behind the vehicle: • At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on. • At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and 40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on. • At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and 23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/ amber/red) will be on. • At dista[...]

• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So, be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 557 . If the DIC still displays the PARKING ASSIST OFF message after cleaning the bumper and driving forward at a speed of at least 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer. • Other conditions that may affect system performance include vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck or other mechanical devices that interfere with URPA performance. • When URPA is disabled without driver action and the driver attempts to turn URPA back on by pressing the rear park aid[...]

To use the power outlet, lift the spring cap and insert electrical 12V device plug. To close the power outlet, remove 12V electrical device plug and the spring cap will close. The accessory power outlets are powered, even with the ignition off. Continuing to use power outlets while the ignition is off may cause the vehicle’s battery to run down. Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into a power outlet, the battery may drain causing your vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This would not be covered by the warranty. Always unplug all electrical devices when turning off your vehicle. Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and cou[...]

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter The front ashtray is located near the center of the instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped. Pull on the ashtray door to open it. Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray. To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up. To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself. Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage fro[...]

To change the current mode, select one of the following: H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. A little air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system wil[...]

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator will flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed. Recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the button again, or turning off the engine. AUX (Auxiliary): Pressing this button will turn the rear heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System on page 239 or Rear Air Condition[...]

- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. This mode directs air to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. 0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield and side window vents and some to the floor vents. In this mode, the system will automa[...]

Dual Automatic Climate Control System With this system, you can control the heating, cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section. You can select different climate control settings for the driver and passengers. Driver’s Side Temperature Control The driver’s side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver’s side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculatio[...]

Passenger’s Side Temperature Control The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used to change the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air will always flow through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this section. Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature. The passenger side display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing. The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to match the driver’s temperature se[...]

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature. To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C) temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the driver’s or passenger’s temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), the system will remain at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster. Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield.[...]

Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed. y9 z (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols allow you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. Pressing one of these buttons when the system is off will turn the system on. Pressing one of these buttons when in automatic control will place the fan under manual control. The fan setting will remain displayed and the AUTO light will turn off. The air delivery mode will remain under automatic control. y N z (Mode): Press the mode up and down buttons to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Repeatedly press the button un[...]

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on. When the button is pressed, an indicator light will come on. This mode keeps outside air from entering the vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and prevent odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculation may also help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle is less than the outside temperature. The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator will flash three times and turn off. The air conditioning compressor will also come on when this mode is activated. While in[...]

Sensors The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly. The interior temperature sensors located in the headliner above the driver side seat and in the headliner above the second row seats measure the temperature of the air inside your vehicle. There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. 236[...]

The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures. Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the mode up and down arrows to select the defog or defrost modes. - (Defog): The d[...]

If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed. Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Outlet Adjustment Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side of your instrument panel to direct the airflow. Operation Tips • Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow, or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far[...]

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls are three knobs located in the headliner. The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls. To turn the system on, press the AUX button on the front climate control system, an indicator will be lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In this mode, the airflow in the rear will be approximately the same direction, temperature, and fan speed as the front. Pressing the AUX button again will turn the rear system and the indicator off. If the rear controls are adjusted, the system will enter a rear independent mode. Airflo[...]

Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. H (Vent): This setting directs the air through the headliner outlets. ) (Bi-Level): Air is delivered through the floor outlets as well as the headliner outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located directly behind the second row seats. The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings. 6 (Floor): This setting directs most of the air through the floor outlets. The rear system floor outlets are located directly behind the second row seats. Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls If your ve[...]

Automatic Operation AUTO: Press the mode button until this setting is selected to control the inside temperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed. AUTO will illuminate in the display when automatic operation is active. +/ − (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press t h e+o r − buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature. The rear control temperature display will show the temperature setting decreasing or increasing. The display will only indicate climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode. Manual Operation y9 z (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat audio control panel allows you to manually adjust the fan speed. To decrease airflow, press the butt[...]

+/ − (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These buttons select the temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area. Press the + button for warmer air and press the − button for cooler air. N (Mode): Press the mode button to manually change the direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode appears on the display. Multiple presses will cycle through the delivery selections. Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages on your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replac[...]

Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. United States version shown. Canada similar. 243[...]

Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Trip Odometer The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero. Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset button for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it. To display the odometer reading with the ign[...]

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for several more. This chime and light will be repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on. Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light [...]

{ CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the airbag system may not be working properly. The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle. If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light does not come on t[...]

{ CAUTION: If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger’s seat, it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on. Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a re[...]

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service. { CAUTION: If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light ever come on together, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 245 . Charging System Light The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, but the engine is not running,[...]

Voltmeter Gage When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts. When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. The charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery for improved fuel economy and battery life. The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading, this is normal. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condit[...]

This light may also come on due to low brake fluid. See Brakes on page 486 for more information. This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. { CAUTION: Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or may go[...]

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light With the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds. That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving, your vehicle needs service. A chime will sound when the light stays on. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have ABS. If the regular brake system warning light is also on you do not have ABS and there is a problem with your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will also hear a chime sound o[...]

StabiliTrak ® Indicator Light If equipped, this warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started. If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak ® system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak ® system is active. If the StabiliTrak ® system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs ser[...]

Tire Pressure Light This light will come on briefly when you turn the ignition to RUN. This light will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information. Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 507 for more information. This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn on solid if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 for more infor[...]

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after awhile, the emission controls might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by your warranty. Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This could also resul[...]

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 451 . The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has bee[...]

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection: Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or not working properly. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen i[...]

A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible. { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. Oil Pressure Light This light will come on briefly when you start your engine. { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if th[...]

That is a check to be sure the light works. If it does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong. When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem. Security Light This light flashes when the vehicle security system is activated. Fog Lamp Light The fog lamp light will come on when the fog lamps are in use. The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 218 for more information. Cruise Control Light This light comes on whenever you set the cruise control. The light goes out when the cruise[...]

Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 207 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode Light This light is displayed when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 422 and Tow/Haul Mode on page 149 . Fuel Gage The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank. The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible. When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more[...]

Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. • At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. • The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the ignition. Low Fuel Warning Light This light, under the fuel gage, will come on briefly when you are starting the engine. This light and a chime will come on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. There will also be[...]

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in this section for the displays available. DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected. The DIC also allows some features to be customized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280 for more information. If your vehicle [...]

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, engine hours, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming for vehicles with a TPM system, and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming. U (Customization): Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 280 for more information. V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC. Trip/Fuel Menu Items 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Odometer [...]

To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. If the retro-active reset feature is activated after the vehicle is started, but before it b[...]

Fuel Used Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays. This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed. Timer Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This display can be used as a timer. To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC. The timer wi[...]

Blank Display This display shows no information. Vehicle Information Menu Items T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and Messages on pa[...]

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 for more information. If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see your dealer for service. Engine Hours Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE HOURS displays. This display shows the total number of hours the engine has run. Relearn Tire Positions If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, after rotating the tires or aft[...]

Blank Display This display shows no information. DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages. The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected. If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, oil life, Ti[...]

Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer. The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed. The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least fou[...]

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 . You should change your oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on page 459 .I n addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 for more information. Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot [...]

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds. On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched. 4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat Step 3. Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the key to LOCK. Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. To select a language, do the following: 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. 2. W[...]

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent. These messages require action before they can be cleared. You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System on page 462 for information on how to reset the message. This message clears itself after 10 sec[...]

DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning) TURNED OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 252 . To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your ve[...]

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 473 for more information. This message displays and a chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays and a chime sounds when the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the e[...]

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil on page 459 for more information. This message displays if low [...]

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267 for more information. REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115 . RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a ch[...]

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 248 . Driving with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your dealer. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 . If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehic[...]

SERVICE STABILITRAK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak ® and this message displays, it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak ® system. If you see this message, try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak ® , so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Autoride ® suspension system, this message displays when the Autoride ® suspension system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle serv[...]

STABILITRAK OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak ® , this message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak ® , or when the stability control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak ® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak ® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 404 .T o turn the StabiliTrak ® system on or off, see StabiliTrak ® System on page 363 . Th[...]

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, this message displays when the system is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267 for more information. The tire positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 , Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 , and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 for more information. TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak ® , this message displays when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned [...]

TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off position. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 485 for more information. DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be [...]

Feature Settings Menu Items The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle: DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set. This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English. Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to display all DIC messages in English. DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/res[...]

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 123 for more information. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset butto[...]

REMOTE DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115 for more information. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps w[...]

Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. DELAY DOOR LOCK This feature allows you to select whe[...]

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from RUN to LOCK. Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. 30 SECONDS (default): The exterior[...]

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 115 for more information. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through th[...]

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. EASY EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for more information. Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT ap[...]

Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur. ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature, the pedals will also automatically move. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 261 o[...]

FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings. Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. Choose one of the available settings and press the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allo[...]

Audio System(s) Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to familiarize yourself with its features. Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 356 . By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle ha[...]

While your vehicle is parked: • Familiarize yourself with all of its controls. • Familiarize yourself with its operation. • Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them. Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment ca[...]

3. To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button. You can also turn the tune knob, located on the upper right side of the radio, to adjust the selected setting. Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. To change the time or date default settings, follow these instructions: 1. Press the clock button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2.[...]

Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. To change the time or date default settings, follow these instructions: 1. Press the clock button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option. 3. Press the clock button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. Setting the Time (MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Playe[...]

Changing the Time and Date Default Settings You can change the time default setting from 12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year. To change the time or date default settings, follow these instructions: 1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option displays, press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option. 3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. Radio with CD (MP3) Radio wit[...]

Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™ offers a large variety of co[...]

Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays. f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations. © SEEK ¨ : Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there. To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning. The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band. 4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information button to displ[...]

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the following steps: 1. Tune to the desired radio station. 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored. 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pr[...]

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune knob until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the pushbutton positio[...]

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position, press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds. Finding a Category (CAT) Station CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired category, perform the following: 1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display. Continue p[...]

Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label. Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). Radio Messages Calibration Error: The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio has not been configured properly and your vehicle must be returned to your dealer for service. Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK ® system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error [...]

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays. When more than one CD is in the radio, the desired CD to be played can be changed by pressing the pushbuttons located under the displayed Disc label. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R quality, [...]

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button for two seconds to eject all discs. f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing. © SEEK ¨ : Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the ne[...]

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD player, press and hold the LOAD button. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of the CD player. To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future listening. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing the disc and/or track number displays whe[...]

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for aud[...]

Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information on the vehicle’s RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.). Dolby ® is manufactured under license from Dolby ® Laboratories. Dolby ® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby ® Laboratories. Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations tha[...]

XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, traff ic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696) or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677). Playing the Radio O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. Tu[...]

Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows the selection. f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations. © SEEK ¨ : Press the left or right SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there. To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning. The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band. 4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information button[...]

Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the following steps: 1. Tune to the desired radio station. 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored. 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns. 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite. The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages, perform the following steps: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup me[...]

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for different types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings. Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source. If the radio has a Bose ® audio system, the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control labels display. Press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highligh[...]

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed, or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XM™ station within the selected category. 4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again. Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through the setup menu. To remove an undesired category, perform the following: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label. 3. Turn the tune knob to display the category you want removed. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the wor[...]

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing (loading a disc into the system, depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing). If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) of the radio are compatible with most audi[...]

Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this section. Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails t[...]

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. RDM (Random): With random, tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To play the tracks from the CD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDM label displays. Press the pushbutton [...]

Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack. Press the power button to turn the radio on. The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers. Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available). If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers. See[...]

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There could have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label could be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information. The DVD player is onl[...]

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 337 for more information. O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on or off. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. Press and hold the knob for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system and to start the parental control feature. Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control. A lock symbol appears next to the clock display. The parental control feature remains on until this button is pr[...]

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the CD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed below for more information. The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V menus and controls through the re[...]

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus. q (Return): Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu. This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active. DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located und[...]

Inserting a Disc To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media. The player starts loading the disc into the system and show “Loading Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display, which requires the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control. Loading a disc into the system, depending on media type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.[...]

DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error: This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems. Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged. Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc is not from a correct region. No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUX button is pressed on the radio. Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s) The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio device [...]

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD s[...]

MP3/WMA Format If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer: • Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on one disc. • The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a combined total of 512 folders and files. • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less. • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confus[...]

Root Directory The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory is displayed as the CD label. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders or files. If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc. Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath th[...]

When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display. The new track name displays. File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display. Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebo[...]

If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris. Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this section. [...]

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the following: 1. To play MP3/W[...]

To change from playback by artist to playback by album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album. To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback. BAND: Press this button to listen t[...]

• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders. The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read 255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions. • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less. • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. • Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls extension as other file extensio[...]

Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them, the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does not display. No Folder When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only compressed files, the files are located under the root folder. The next and previous folder function does not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT. When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists and compressed audio files, but n[...]

File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays. Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files. Playing an MP3/WMA ([...]

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can be an increase in skipping, diff iculty in finding tracks, and/or diff iculty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 353 for more information. If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than on[...]

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the Z DVD button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the Z DVD button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. f (Tune): Turn the f knob to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing. © SEEK ¨ : Press the left © SEEK ar[...]

RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW you are listening to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It might take several minutes to scan the disc depending on th[...]

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment. DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. I[...]

XM Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after [...]

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required CAT Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM TheftLocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer. XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service. Unknown Radio ID not known (should only be if ha[...]

Navigation/Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system. The navigation system has built-in features intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no matter how advanced, can never replace your own judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some tips to help you reduce distractions while driving. Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless headphones, and a remote control. See Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) [...]

To enable Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds. If on, the radio, video screen, and RSA turns off. If a DVD and/or CD is playing, it stops. While Parental Control is on, either a padlock icon or a text message comes on, depending on the radio. When the radio is turned back on, the RSE system remains in Parental Control. To turn off Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds. The video screen and RSA returns to the state they were in before Parental Control was turned on and if the padlock icon is on the display, it disappears. Parental Control is also turned off by inserting or ejecting a disc, by pressing th[...]

Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If the light does not come on, the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Switch the headphones to Off when not in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections. Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out of the ve[...]

Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones, do the following: 1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones. Slide the battery door open. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw. If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console, allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary[...]

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) on page 305 for more information. How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup men[...]

When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has this feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones. The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio. Video Screen The video screen is located in the RSE overhead console. To use the video screen, do the following: 1. Push the release button located on the RSE overhead console. 2. Turn the screen to the desired position. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position. If a DVD is playing and[...]

Remote Control To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote control. If the remote control does not seem to be working, the batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also affect the function of the remote control. If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc. The radio can also turn on the video screen display[...]

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for each disc. y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. n , q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu. r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu. z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom), and display the language m[...]

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. [ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This butto[...]

Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries, do the following: 1. Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Close the battery door securely. If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Problem Recommended Action No power. The ignition might not be turned on or in accessory. The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out. Check t[...]

Problem Recommended Action The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices. Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes. Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the [...]

DVD Distortion Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies. It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle. *Excludes the OnStar ® System. Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) This feature allows rear seat passengers to l[...]

P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off. Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped), CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. ©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM (if equipped), press the seek up or the seek down arrow to go to the next or the previous station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold the[...]

While listening to a disc, press the seek up arrow to goto the next track or chapter on the disc. Press the seek down arrow to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to perform a cursor right or left on the menu. PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the fr[...]

Audio Steering Wheel Controls If your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls, they could differ depending on your vehicle’s options. Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the following: xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite. When a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or previous track or chapter. g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if your vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and release this button again, to turn the so[...]

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. + e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to increase or to decrease the radio volume. ¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped). Press this button to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Radio Reception Frequency interference and static during normal radio reception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power ou[...]

XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can cause loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference. Care of Your CDs and DVDs Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the sur[...]

Rear Side Window Antenna Your AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear side windows. Be sure that the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception. Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio reception or damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows with sharp objects. Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or d[...]

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..................................................... 35 6 Defensive Driving ...................................... 35 6 Drunken Driving ........................................ 35 7 Control of a Vehicle .................................. 36 0 Braking ...................................................... 36 0 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 36 1 Braking in Emergencies ............................. 36 3 Locking Rear Axle ..................................... 363 StabiliTrak ® System ................................... 36 3 Steering .................................................... 36 7 Off-Road Recovery ............................[...]

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 38 . { CAUTION: Defensive driving really means “Be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or expressways, it means “Always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. Defensive driving requires that [...]

Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: • Judgment • Muscular Coordination • Vision • Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults — by some estimates, nearly [...]

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka. It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women[...]

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of t[...]

Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 363 . Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 . Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 . Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you [...]

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If the engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 . Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin to drive away, ABS will check[...]

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. 362[...]

Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have ABS. Using ABS Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Locking Rear Axle If you[...]

If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak ® light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make sure the StabiliTrak ® system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak ® on/off button. Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to the three o’clock position. If this clears the message(s), your vehicle does not need servicing. If this does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset the system. If any [...]

The traction control part of StabiliTrak ® can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak ® button if both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak ® ) were previously on. To disable both traction control and StabiliTrak ® , press and hold the button for five seconds. Traction control and StabiliTrak ® can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak ® button if not automatically shut off for any other reason. When the TCS or StabiliTrak ® system is turned off, the StabiliTrak ® light and the appropriate TCS off or StabiliTrak ® off message will be displayed on the DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have brake-traction control when traction cont[...]

Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak ® system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary. The traction control system is enabled automatically when you start your vehicle. It will activate and the StabiliTrak ® light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. If you turn off traction control, only the brake-traction control portion of traction control will work. The engine speed management will be disabled. In this mode, engine power is not r[...]

Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here is why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a vehi[...]

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 444 . Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot;[...]

Of f-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes bac[...]

So here are some tips for passing: • Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. • Watch for traff ic signs, pavement markings, and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traff ic. • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you ar[...]

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. Remember that, if your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is. • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashin[...]

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. Remember: StabiliTrak ® helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 363 . If the StabiliTrak ® System is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you will want to slow down an[...]

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. “Off-roading” means you have left the great North American road system behind. Traff ic lanes are not marked. Curves are not banked. There are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature. Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that is why it is very important that you read this guide. You will find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle, you can r[...]

Before You Go Of f-Roading There are some things to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive or all-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be driving? If you do not know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission. Lo[...]

CAUTION: (Continued) • Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible. There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. • The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can. • Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain does not toss things around. You will find other important information in this manual. See Loading Your[...]

Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads. It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can help quickly. Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know how to use it properly. Getting Familiar with Of f-Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home [...]

{ CAUTION: When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts. Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many dif ferent kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider. Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon [...]

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. In a way, off-road driving requires a dif ferent kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what is not. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident i[...]

Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs. Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill. • Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? • Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the sur[...]

Driving Uphill Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps. • Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel. • Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Do not use more power than you need, because you do not want the wheels to start spinning or sliding. { CAUTION: Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, always try to go straight up. • Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. • Ease up [...]

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill? A: If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do. First, here is what you should do: • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake. • If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R). • If your engine has stopped running, you will need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift [...]

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill. • Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control. Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down. { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). This is because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone els[...]

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill and decide I just cannot do it. What should I do? A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to consider a number of things: • How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? • What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? • Are there hidden su[...]

Q: Are there some things I should not do when driving down a hill? A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident. • When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across. You could roll over if you do not drive straight down. • Never go downhill with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill? A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here is what t[...]

Driving Across an Incline Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider: { CAUTION: Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, do not drive across it. Find another route instead. • A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood[...]

Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do? A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it. Stalling on an Incline { CAUTION: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollo[...]

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your wheels will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as quickly, turning is more diff icult, and you will need longer braking distances. It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do not get stuck. When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced s[...]

Driving in Water { CAUTION: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing water. Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts. If the water is not too deep,[...]

Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Here are some tips on night driving. • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you. • Since you cannot see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. • In remote areas, watch for animals. • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. No[...]

Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are n[...]

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traff ic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to [...]

Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just is not a hard and fast rule about[...]

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips • Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your parking lamps — to help make you more visible to others. • Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 507 . City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traff ic on them. You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traff ic signals. 393[...]

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: • Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. • Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You will save time and energy. See Freeway Driving on page 394 . • Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traff ic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. Freeway Driving Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, [...]

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traff ic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traff ic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traff ic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with t[...]

Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America. They will be ready and willing to help if you need it. Here are some things you can check before a trip: • Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full[...]

Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool int[...]

Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road Driving on page 372 for information about driving off-road. • Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. { CAUTION: If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to le[...]

{ CAUTION: Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have the engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. • Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. • Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill better. • St[...]

Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. • You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle. Also see Tires on page 507 . Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. 400[...]

Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowi[...]

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 361 . • Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. • Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patc[...]

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. { CAUTION: Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. 403[...]

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle [...]

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting the transmission back and forth, you can destroy the transmission. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 530 . Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First, turn the steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around the front wheels. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low. Turn the StabiliTrak ® System off. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 363 . Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the [...]

Recovery Hooks { CAUTION: These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back. Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle. You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. 406[...]

Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. { CAUTION: Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can [...]

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 507 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 . There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’[...]

Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs (136 kg) C Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg) Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (136 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg) Example 1 Example 2 409[...]

Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight ca[...]

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. The Certification/Tire label also contains information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. { CAUTION: Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or[...]

If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. { CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat [...]

Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle a snow plow? A: Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep package, called RPO VYU. If your vehicle has this option, you can add a plow to it, provided certain weights, such as the weights on the vehicle’s axles and the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not exceeded. Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be? A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many things, such as: • The options your vehicle came with, and the weight of those options. • The weight and number of passengers you intend to carry. • The weight of items you have added to your vehicle. • The total weight of any additional cargo you intend to carry. Say, for exampl[...]

• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear weight distribution ratio. • The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating. Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and how do I calculate it? A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between your front Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight you can add to your front axle before reaching your front GAWR. The front axle reserve cap[...]

In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front axle, use the following formula: (W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle. Where: W = Weight of added accessory A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then: W = 700 lb (318 kg) A = 4 ft (122 cm) W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm) (W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 980 lbs (445 kg) So, if[...]

Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment to my vehicle? A: You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be exceeded. { CAUTION: On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be possible to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance. If your brakes can not work properly, you could have a [...]

Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity? A: This is the difference between your GVWR and the weight of your vehicle with full fuel and passengers. It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR. Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your vehicle can carry. If you are unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can also help you with this. The total vehicle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire label as shown previously. See your dealer for additional[...]

Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing, towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”. With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following. Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing: • What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you re[...]

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle: 1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P). 2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. 4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. 5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See Four-Wheel Drive on page 150 for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for your vehicle. 6. Release th[...]

Dolly Towing Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly with the front wheels on the ground provided that the wheels are straight. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak ® ,i ti s not designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow your [...]

{ CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. 6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 150 for the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for your vehicle. 7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle. Level Control Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension is available on two-wheel drive and four-wheel drive light-duty vehicles and comes as a part [...]

Autoride ® If equipped, the Autoride ® feature will provide a superior vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions. The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride. Autoride ® also interacts with the tow/haul switch that, when engaged, will provide additional control of the shock absorbers. This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing[...]

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking, handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do, here are some im[...]

Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul mode is to: • Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. • Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the vehicle is unloaded. • Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. • Increase the charging system voltage to assist in recharging a battery installed in a trailer. Press this button at the end of the shift lever to enable/dis[...]

Your vehicle is equipped with a button at the end of the shift lever which, when pressed, enables tow/haul. Your vehicle may be equipped with Autoride ® which further improves your vehicle’s ride while towing. See Autoride ® on page 422 for more information. When the button is pressed, a light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that Tow/Haul has been selected. Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing the button again, at which time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will automatically turn of f Tow/Haul every time it is started. Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent [...]

Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options. C-1500 (2WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 4800 V8 3.23 3.73 4,200 lbs (1 905 kg) 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 5300 V8 3.42 3.73 6,200 lbs (2 812 kg) 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 5300 V8 (Extended Models) 3.73 4.10 7,100 lbs (3 220 kg) 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 6000 V8 (Extended Models) 4.10 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) K-1500 (4WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 5300 V8 3.73 4.10 6,700 lbs (3 039 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 13,000 lbs [...]

C-2500 (2WD) Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 6000 V8 (Extended Models) 3.73 4.10 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) K-2500 (4WD Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR 6000 V8 (Extended Models) 3.73 4.10 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 257 kg) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be exceeded. You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your Warranty [...]

Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for more information about your vehi[...]

After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight. Consider the following example: A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear [...]

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs: Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider [...]

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 for more information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight distribution spring bars. Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the righ[...]

If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. Safety Chains You should always attach safety chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Attach the safety chains to the attaching point on th[...]

Driving with a Trailer { CAUTION: If you have a rear-most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or death. See Engine Exhaust on page 160 . To maximize your safety when towing a trailer: • Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Keep the rear-most windows closed. • If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,[...]

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden [...]

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to u[...]

Parking on Hills { CAUTION: You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into PARK (P) yet. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake and shift into PARK (P). 5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive g[...]

CAUTION: (Continued) If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: • start your engine, • shift into a gear, and • release the parking brake. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Sc[...]

Trailer Wiring Harness Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring harnesses for towing a trailer. Basic Trailer Wiring The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector, is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector available through your dealer. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red: Battery Feed* • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the un[...]

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red: Battery Feed* • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer or a qualified service center. If you are charging a remote (non-[...]

Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with your vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the following wires: • Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector • Red/Black: Battery • Light Blue/White: Brake Switch • White: Ground It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified service center. Power Winches If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored. Trailer Recommendations You must subtract y[...]

Service ........................................................ 44 4 Accessories and Modifications ................... 44 4 California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 44 5 Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 44 5 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle .......................................... 446 Fuel ............................................................. 44 6 Gasoline Octane ........................................ 44 7 Gasoline Specifications .............................. 44 7 California Fuel ........................................... 447 Additives ................................................... 44 8 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................[...]

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 505 Tires ............................................................ 50 7 Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 50 8 Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 51 2 Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 51 5 Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 51 6 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 52 1 When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 52 3 Buying New Tires ...................................... 52 4 Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 52 6 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 527 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 52 8 Wheel Replacement [...]

Vehicle Identification .................................. 56 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 56 2 Service Parts Identification Label ............... 5 63 Electrical System ........................................ 56 3 Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 56 3 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 56 4 Power Windows and Other Power Options .................................................. 56 4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 56 4 Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 56 5 Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 5 66 Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 56 7 Capacities and Specifications ......[...]

Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Accessories and Modifications When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability control. Some of these accessories may even cause malfu[...]

California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. Doing Your Own Service Work { CAUTION: You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Be sure you have suff icient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before you attempt any vehicle [...]

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 106 . You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 594 . Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the engine clean[...]

Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommends against [...]

Additives To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most [...]

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on page 562 . If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), you can use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel on page 446 . In all other engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline Octane on page 447 . Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3) can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the us[...]

It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as possible — do not add less than three gallons (11 L) when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration. E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank on page 451 . Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuel system. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by [...]

Filling the Tank { CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver’s side of the ve[...]

To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge inboard and release. The door will pop open. To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. 452[...]

{ CAUTION: If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 557 . When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system[...]

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed. { CAUTION: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 253 . 454[...]

Filling a Portable Fuel Container { CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: • Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. • Do n[...]

Checking Things Under the Hood { CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 456[...]

Hood Release To open the hood do the following: 1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release, near the center of the grille. 3. Push the secondary hood release to the right. 4. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position, pause, then push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood. 457[...]

Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.8L and 6.0L similar), here is what you will see: 458[...]

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 464 . B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped). See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 464 . C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 477 and Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 473 . D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 491 . E. Battery. See Battery on page 490 . F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 459 . G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 466 . H. Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal (Out of View). See Jump Starting on page 491 . I. Engine Oil Di[...]

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, you need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil cr[...]

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things: • GM6094M Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. • SAE 5W-30 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. • Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6[...]

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below − 20°F ( − 29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier cold starting and better protection for the engine at extremely low temperatures. Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for good performance and engine protection. Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage[...]

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on, reset the system. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil Life System, do the following: 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access this display. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Bu[...]

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter and the air filter restriction indicator, if the vehicle has one. When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator, it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction indicator, you should inspect the air filter restriction indicator at every oil change and replace the engine air cleaner/filter when the indicator tells you to. On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator, inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it a[...]

How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction Indicator Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace the engine air cleaner/ filter and to reset the air filter restriction indicator. Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction Indicator To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6. When you have the engine air cleaner/filter removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If[...]

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and the housing. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. 7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if the vehicle has one, by pressing the top button on the indicator. { CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, [...]

How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little diff icult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been[...]

Checking the Fluid Level Prepare your vehicle as follows: 1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. 2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). 4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more. Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: The transmission dipstick handle with this graphic is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on locati[...]

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer. How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 . Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is ho[...]

Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL ® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL ® extended life coolant. The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 473 . A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant will: • Give freezing protection down to − 34°F ( − 37°C). • Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). • Protect against rust and corrosion. • Help keep the proper engine temperatur[...]

What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL ® coolant which will not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do not need to add anything else. { CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® co[...]

Checking Coolant The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on location. { CAUTION: Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — even a little — when the engine and radiator are hot. The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark. Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL ® coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the engine is coo[...]

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for more information on location. Engine Overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 252 . In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and an ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel. See [...]

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine { CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 476 for information on driving to a saf[...]

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem. If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: • Climb a long hill on a hot day. • Stop after high-speed driving. • Idle for long periods in traff ic. • Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 422 . If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, tu[...]

If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least five minutes while you are parked. If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan, idle the engine for five minutes while you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If[...]

Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what you will see: A. Coolant Surge Tank B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap C. Engine Cooling Fan(s) { CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If possible, the vehicle should be parked on a level surface. Check the coolant level after the system cools down. Some amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating. 5.3L Engine (4.8L and 6.0L Similar) 477[...]

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. { CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. 478[...]

Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 476 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® may cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if coolant is visible in the surge [...]

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows: { CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. { CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle?[...]

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. { CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. 1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep tur[...]

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to the FULL COLD mark. 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. 482[...]

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. 6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure steps 1 through 6. Engine Fan Noise If your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you may hear an increas[...]

Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for reservoir location. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid, do the following: 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look a[...]

Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has suff icient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message is displayed, you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until th[...]

Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 458 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not work at all. So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. Adding b[...]

{ CAUTION: If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section. When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 249 . Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 . Checking Brake Fluid You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap. Look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be a[...]

What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 . Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. { CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake system, the brakes may not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Notice: • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to[...]

Brake Wear Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. { CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied o[...]

Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system — for example, when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance you have come to expect can c[...]

Jump Starting If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. { CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damag[...]

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative ( − ) terminal locations on that vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump star[...]

{ CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contain[...]

Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative ( − ) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative ( − )o r you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) termina[...]

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative ( − ) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery. 2. Disconnect the black negat[...]

Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production. They are not filled to reach a certain level. When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the[...]

• For 6.0L engines, the proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. • The proper fill level for the 2500 Series is from 0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located at the front of the axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. Four-Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles. There are two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an [...]

What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 . Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the front axle, you may need to add some lubricant: • When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level f[...]

What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 . Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the aim of the headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be necessary. If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this may mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to be adjusted. It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted. It is possible however[...]

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 457 for more information. 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam headlamp. 3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record the distance. 4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. Turn[...]

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly. The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 Torx ® socket. 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam. 9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp. 501[...]

Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 504 . For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Halogen Bulbs { CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps A. Taillamp/Stoplamp B. Back-up Lamp C. Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp 502[...]

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on page 127 for more information. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly. 3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you disengage the inner pins on the taillamp assembly from the vehicle. 4. Press the release tab, if bulb socket has one, and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly. 5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket. 6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert it into the taillamp assembly. Turn the bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks. 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling, make[...]

License Plate Lamp 1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate. 2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward through the molding opening. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Install the new bulb. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp. Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back-up Lamp 3047 License Plate Lamp 168 Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp, and Stoplamp 3047 For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer/retailer. 504[...]

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 579 . Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following: 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield. 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade, and rotate the blade assembly away from the arm connector. 3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position. For the proper type and size, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 592 . 505[...]

Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park rest position. 2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position, so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle. 3. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm. 4. Replace the wiper blade. 5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position. 506[...]

Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle. { CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your vehicle’s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 . • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires f[...]

Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidel[...]

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 527 . (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit[...]

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 . (D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Tra[...]

Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size. (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digi[...]

Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by ste[...]

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 . Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible[...]

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See Wh[...]

Inflation - Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • Too much flexing • Too much heat • Tire overloading • Premature or irregular wear • Poor handling • Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • Unusual wear • Poor handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s d[...]

How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is [...]

For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 261 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 267 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 270 . You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, that the tire pressure monitor light, located on the instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive the vehicle. This could be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked mon[...]

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicl[...]

Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order: driver’s side front tire, passengers side front tire, passengers side rear tire, and driver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your GM dealer for service. The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not exceed the maximum [...]

5. Start with the driver’s side front tire. 6. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which make take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position. To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key. 7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 6. 8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 6. 9. Proceed to the drive[...]

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interfe[...]

When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 , for more information. Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after a tire rotation. See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” under Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 516 . Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and[...]

When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the si[...]

Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires. GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and [...]

{ CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires. Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that[...]

Dif ferent Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected. { CAUTION: If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serio[...]

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traff ic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim di[...]

Temperature – A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The tempe[...]

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle. { CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel [...]

Tire Chains { CAUTION: If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) To help avoid damage to your ve[...]

If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traff ic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid.[...]

Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 204 for more information. { CAUTION: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear— not in NEUTRAL. 4. Turn[...]

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks. The following information will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is stored under the storage tray, which is located on the driver’s side trim panel (over the rear wheelhouse). 1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up on the finger depression under the jack symbol. Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase similar. 533[...]

2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool bag by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket. 4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut (C) counterclockwise. The tools you will be using include the following: A. Jack B. Wheel Blocks C. Jack Handle D. Jack Handle Extensions E. Wheel Wrench 534[...]

To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics and instructions: A. Hoist Assembly B. Hoist Shaft C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole D. Jack Handle Extensions E. Wheel Wrench F. Hoist Cable G. Tire Retainer H. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole J. Hoist End of Extension Tool K. Spare Tire Lock 1. Open the hoist shaft access door (C) on the bumper to access the spare tire lock (K). 2. Insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise and then pull it to remove the spare tire lock. 3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and wheel wrench (E) as shown. 535[...]

4. Insert the open end of the extension (J) through the hole in the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft access hole). Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D) connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. 5. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 543 for more information. 6. Use the wheel wrench hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards you[...]

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle. 1. Remove the center cap, if your vehicle has one, by placing the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out. If the wheel has bolt-on wheel covers, loosen the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. If needed, finish loosening them by hand. The nut caps will not come off. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off. 2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do no[...]

A. Front Position B. Rear Position { CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { CAUTION: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. Jacking Locations (Overall View) 538[...]

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack handle to the jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground. Front Position Rear Position – 1500 Models 539[...]

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B) and both jack handle extensions (C). Attach the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle extensions (C). Attach the jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground. 4. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 5. Take off the flat tire. Rear Position – All Other Models 540[...]

{ CAUTION: Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. 6. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. { CAUTION: Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 7. Put the wheel nuts back o[...]

8. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is held against the hub. 9. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely. { CAUTION: Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 572 for wheel nut torque specification. Notice: Im[...]

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must also reinstall the either the center cap, or bolt-on hub cap, depending on what your vehicle has. For center caps, place the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten. Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly which has a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle. For [...]

2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable. 3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 533 . 5. If the spare tire does not lower, turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with the backs facing each other. 7. Place the bottom edge of the jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),[...]

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper. 9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting. 545[...]

11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place so that the secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. { CAUTION: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from under the spare. 13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and carefully remove the jack with the other hand. 14. Use one[...]

15. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle. 16. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has been replaced. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 537 . Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. [...]

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics and instructions to help you: A. Hoist Assembly B. Hoist Shaft C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole D. Jack Handle Extensions E. Wheel Wrench F. Hoist Cable G. Tire Retainer H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole J. Hoist End of Extension Tool K. Spare Tire Lock 1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear. 548[...]

2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and wheel wrench (E) as shown. 4. Insert the open end of the extension (J) through the hole in the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft access hole). 5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable. 549[...]

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock. 9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover. To store the tools, do the following. A. Wheel Blocks B. Tool Bag with Jack Tools C. Retaining Bracket D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag E. Jack F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks G. Wing Nut on Jack 1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B). 550[...]

2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together with the wing nut (F). 3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the driver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse. 4. Turn the wing nut (G) clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket. 5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool bag (B) on the stud and turn the wing nut (D) clockwise to secure. 6. Return the storage tray to its original stored position. 551[...]

Spare Tire Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 407 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 537 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 547 . Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed on your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. Y[...]

Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly. Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer colo[...]

Your dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can also obtain a product from your dealer to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery. Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners or techniques: • Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface. • Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s interior surfaces. • Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal. • Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps wi[...]

To clean, use the following instructions: 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or club soda. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean. 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water. If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small hidden [...]

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. So[...]

Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention, and durability. The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 561 .D on o t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allo[...]

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned r[...]

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim Your vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. This damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice: If you use strong soa[...]

Tires To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired[...]

Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials Description Usage Polishing Cloth Wax-Treated Interior and exterior polishing cloth. Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, [...]

Description Usage Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans, shines, and protects in one step. No wiping necessary. Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Biodegradable and phosphate free. Spot Lifter Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets, vinyl, and cloth upholstery. Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet. Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Certi[...]

Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has the following information: • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • Model designation • Paint information • Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Add-on equipment [...]

Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, cir[...]

Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver’s side edge of the instrument panel. Fuses Usage LT DR Driver’s Side Power Window Circuit Breaker REAR SEAT Rear Seats Fuses Usage AUX PWR2 Rear Cargo Area Power Outlets SWC BKLT Steering Wheel Controls Backlight DDM Driver Door Module CTSY Dome Lamps, Driver’s Side Turn Signal LT STOP TRN Driver’s Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp DIM Instrument Panel Back Lighting RT STOP TRN Passenger’s Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp BCM Body Control Module UNLCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature) LCK2 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature) STOP LAMPS Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted Stoplamp REAR HVAC Rear Climate Co[...]

Fuses Usage IS LPS Interior Lamps UNLCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature) OBS DET Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power Liftgate LCK1 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature) REAR WPR Rear Wiper COOLED SEATS Not Used DSM Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless Entry System Harness Connector Usage LT DR Driver’s Door Harness Connection BODY Harness Connector BODY Harness Connector Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Top View Harness Connector Usage BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 566[...]

Harness Connector Usage HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 BRAKE CLUTCH Brake Clutch Harness Connector SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option Upfitter Harness Connector Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger’s Side Power Window Circuit Breaker CB2 Passenger’s Seat Circuit Breaker CB3 Driver’s Seat Circuit Breaker CB4 Not Used Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. 56[...]

Fuses Usage 1 Not Used 2 Electronic Stability Suspension Control, Automatic Level Control Exhaust Fuses Usage 3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 4 Engine Controls 5 Engine Control Module, Throttle Control 568[...]

Fuses Usage 6 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 7 Front Washer 8 Oxygen Sensors 9 Anti-lock Brakes System 2 10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 11 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp 12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Right Side) 14 Transmission Control Module (Battery) 15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps 16 Passenger’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp 17 Air Conditioning Compressor Fuses Usage 18 Oxygen Sensors 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition) 20 Fuel Pump 21 Not Used 22 Rear Washer 23 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Left Side) 24 Trailer Park Lamps 25 Driver’s Side Park Lamps 26 Passenger’s Side Park Lamps 27 Fog Lamps 28 Horn 29 Passenger’s Side High-Beam Headlamp 569[...]

Fuses Usage 30 Daytime Running Lamps 31 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp 32 Not Used 33 Sunroof, Emergency Roof Lamp 34 Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent System 35 Windshield Wiper 36 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 37 Electric Adjustable Pedals 38 Climate Controls (Battery) 39 Airbag System (Ignition) 40 Amplifier 41 Audio System 42 Four-Wheel Drive 43 Miscellaneous (Ignition), Rear Vision Camera, Cruise Control Fuses Usage 44 Liftgate Release 45 OnStar ® , Rear Seat Entertainment Display 46 Instrument Panel Cluster 47 Not Used 48 Not Used 49 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition), Compass-Temperature Mirror 50 Rear Defogger 51 Airbag System (Battery) 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Batter[...]

J-Case Fuses Usage 60 Cooling Fan 1 61 Automatic Level Control Compressor 62 Heavy Duty Anti-lock Brake System 63 Cooling Fan 2 64 Anti-lock Brake System 1 65 Starter 66 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) 67 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 68 Electric Running Boards 69 Heated Windshield Washer System 70 Four-Wheel Drive System 71 Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery Power) 72 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1 73 Climate Control Blower 74 Power Liftgate Module 75 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 Relays Usage FAN HI Cooling Fan High Speed FAN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed ENG EXH VLV Not Used FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor S[...]

Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 590 for more information. Application Capacities English Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer for more information. Cooling System 4.8L V8 17.8 qt 16.9 L 5.3L V8 18.3 qt 17.3 L 6.0L V8 1500 Series 17.9 qt 16.9 L 6.0L V8 2500 Series 17.4 qt 16.5 L Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt† 5.7 L† Fuel Tank Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 L Extended 1500 Series 31.5 gal 119.2 L Extended 2500 Series 39.0 gal 147.6 L Tran[...]

Application Capacities English Metric Transfer Case Fluid 2.0 qt 1.9 L Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y †Oil filter should be changed at every oil change. After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating range. Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management™ (Iron) 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management™ (Aluminum Block) 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 with Active Fuel Management™ J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.0L V8 K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.0L V8 [...]

✍ NOTES 574[...]

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 57 6 Introduction ............................................... 57 6 Maintenance Requirements ........................ 57 6 Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 576 Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 57 7 Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 57 9 Additional Required Services ..................... 58 2 Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 58 4 Owner Checks and Services ..................... 58 6 At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 58 6 At Least Once a Month ............................. 5 87 At Least Once a Year ............................... 58 7 Recommended Flui[...]

Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by warranty. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good[...]

Using the Maintenance Schedule We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM Goodwrench ® [...]

{ CAUTION: Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, see your GM Goodwrench ® dealer to have a qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 445 . Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench ® dealer do these jobs. When you go to your GM Goodwrench ® dealer for your service needs, you will know that GM-trained and supported service technicians [...]

Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on, it means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench ® dealer has GM-trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you must service y[...]

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I . Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year. Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 459 . Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 462 . An Emission Control Service. •• Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. •• Visually check for [...]

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d) Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed. •• Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section. •• Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. • 581[...]

Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service ( I or II ) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • ••• • Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. • • ••• • Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator: Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 464 . ••• Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (severe service). See footnot[...]

Additional Required Services (cont’d) Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case fluid. See footnote (g). ••• Inspect evaporative control system. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (k). ••• Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. • Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). • Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. See footnote (m). • 583[...]

Maintenance Footnotes † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, and parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on 2500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F ( − 12°C) or higher, or they c[...]

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag system does not need regular maintenance. (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, li[...]

(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped. Replace as needed. (l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. (m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary. Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability, and emission control performance of your vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench ® dealer can assist you with these checks and services. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed a[...]

At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 515 . Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 532 . Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 521 . At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the[...]

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 156 . Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench ® deal[...]

Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transmission in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking [...]

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench ® oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 459 . Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 470 . Hydraulic Brake System Delco ® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Usage Fluid[...]

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Front Axle (2500 Series Vehicles with Four-Wheel Drive) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in Canada 10953455) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in Canada 10953455) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Automatic Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) AUTO-TRAK II Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in Canada 10953626). Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.) Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 10953511) or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood Hinges Mu[...]

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer. Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® Part Number Engine Air Cleaner /Filter High Capacity Filter 15908915 A1518C Standard Filter 15908916 A1519C* Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12571164 41-985 Wiper Blades Front – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm) 15930910 — Rear – 11.8 inches (30.0 cm) 15173728 — *A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted. 592[...]

Engine Drive Belt Routing 593[...]

Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 576 . Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 586 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 594[...]

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 595[...]

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 596[...]

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 598 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 59 8 Online Owner Center ................................. 6 01 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 60 2 Customer Assistance Off ices ..................... 60 2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 603 Roadside Assistance Program ................... 60 4 Courtesy Transportation ............................. 60 7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders ...................................... 60 9 Collision Damage Repair ........................... 6 10 Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 6 15 Reporting Safety Defects to the U[...]

Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer/retailer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s/retailer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership/retailer management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sale[...]

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer/retailer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights. The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use [...]

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision[...]

Online Owner Center Online Owner Center (United States only) The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in one place. The Online Owner Center allows you to: • Get e-mail service reminders. • Access information about your specific vehicle, including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual. • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and maintenance schedule. • Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide. • Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members. Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle. My GM Canada (Canada only) [...]

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Of fices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to: United States — Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232[...]

Overseas — Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited [...]

Roadside Assistance Program In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872) . In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800 . Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance program. Who is Covered? Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner is not eligible for coverage. The following services are provided in the U.S. during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and, in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to a maximum coverage o[...]

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer is responsible for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure. • Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a battery jump start will be covered at no charge. • Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed, computer personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either the most direct route or the most scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North America, along with helpful travel information pertaining to your trip. We will make every attempt to send [...]

• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may be times, when Roadside Assistance cannot provide timely assistance, your advisor may authorize you to secure local emergency road service, and you will be reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadian customers of the new Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are the responsibility of the driver. For prompt and eff icient assistance when calling, please provide the following to the Roadside Assista[...]

Towing and Road Service Exclusions Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers/retailers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles. For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper (U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period (Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,[...]

Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer/retailer can offer you one of the following: Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation and participating dealers/retailers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters for the dealer’s/retailer’s area. Public Transportation or [...]

Additional Program Information All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer/retailer. Please contact your dealer/retailer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer/retailer personnel. General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer systems th[...]

To read this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required. GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than: • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, • in response to an off icial request of police or similar government off ice, • as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the discovery process, or • as required by law. In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may: • use the data for GM research needs, • make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is [...]

Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintai[...]

Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance ca[...]

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name, the service’s name, and the phone number. • Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle. • Gather the important information you will need from the other driver. Things like name, address, phone number, driver’s license number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and policy number, and a general description of the damage to[...]

Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with y[...]

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traff ic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 ([...]

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases. Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give technical service information [...]

Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US + Processing Fee Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US + Processing Fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Easter[...]

✍ NOTES 618[...]

A Accessories and Modifications ..................... 444 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ................................................ 41 2 Adding Equipment to Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle ........................... 1 07 Additives, Fuel ............................................ 4 48 Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 56 3 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 14 3 Air Cleaner/Filter , Engine ............................. 464 Air Conditioning .................................. 227, 231 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 2 46 Readiness Light ....................................... 24 5 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (S[...]

Appearance Care (cont.) Weatherstrips ........................................... 5 56 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ........................................ 55 8 Ashtray ....................................................... 22 7 Audio System .............................................. 29 0 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 351 Care of Y our CD and DVD Player ............ 35 3 Care of Y our CDs and DVDs ................... 353 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual ......................... 33 7 Radio with CD ......................................... 29 4 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 348 Setting the Time ..................... 291, 29[...]

C Calibration .......................................... 162, 166 California Fuel ............................................. 44 7 California Proposition 65 W arning ................ 4 45 Canadian Owners ........................................... 3 Capacities and Specifications ...................... 572 Carbon Monoxide ..... 125, 127, 160, 400, 422 Care of Safety Belts ............................................. 55 6 Y our CD and DVD Player ........................ 35 3 Y our CDs and DVDs ................................ 35 3 Cargo Cover ............................................... 192 Cargo Management System ........................ 19 4 CD , MP 3 .................................[...]

Cleaning (cont.) Weatherstrips ........................................... 5 56 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ........................................ 55 8 Climate Control System ............................... 22 7 Dual Automatic ......................................... 231 Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 238 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ................................................. 23 9 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System, Electronic ................................ 2 40 Clock ......................................... 291, 292, 293 Collision Damage Repair ............................. 61 0 Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ............[...]

Dome Lamp Override .................................. 21 9 Dome Lamps ............................................... 21 9 Door Delayed Locking ...................................... 12 3 Locks ....................................................... 12 2 Power Door Locks ................................... 12 3 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 1 23 Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 12 4 Driver Position, Safety Belt ................................... 43 Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 26 0 DIC Operation and Displays ............ 261, 267 DIC V ehicle Customization ....................... 280 DIC W arnings and Messages ................... 270 Drivi[...]

Engine (cont.) Oil Life System ........................................ 46 2 Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 47 6 Overheating ............................................. 47 3 Starting .................................................... 14 1 Entry Lighting .............................................. 22 0 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 609 Exit Lighting ................................................ 22 0 Extender , Safety Belt ..................................... 60 Exterior Lamps ............................................ 21 5 F Filter Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 46 4 Finish Damage ...........................................[...]

G Gage Engine Coolant T emperature .................... 252 Fuel ......................................................... 25 9 Oil Pressure ............................................. 25 6 Speedometer ........................................... 24 4 T achometer .............................................. 24 4 V oltmeter Gage ........................................ 24 9 Garage Door Opener ................................... 17 8 Gasoline Octane ..................................................... 44 7 Specifications ........................................... 44 7 Glove Box ................................................... 19 0 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 60 3 H Ha[...]

J Jump Starting .............................................. 49 1 K Keyless Entry System ................................. 1 14 Keys ........................................................... 11 3 L Labeling, T ire Sidewall ................................. 50 8 Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................. 21 8 Dome ....................................................... 21 9 Dome Lamp Override ............................... 21 9 Exterior .................................................... 21 5 Reading ................................................... 22 0 LA TCH System Child Restraints ......................................... 74 Level Control ................................[...]

Locks Delayed Locking ...................................... 12 3 Door ........................................................ 12 2 Lockout Protection ................................... 12 4 Power Door ............................................. 12 3 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 1 23 Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 12 4 Loss of Control ........................................... 3 71 Low Fuel W arning Light ............................... 26 0 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 191 Lumbar Power Controls .......................................... 1 1 M Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services .................... 58 2 At Each[...]

N Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual ..................................................... 33 7 New V ehicle Break-In .................................. 13 9 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 592 O Odometer .................................................... 24 4 Odometer , T rip ............................................ 24 4 Off-Road Driving .......................................... 37 2 Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 36 9 Oil Engine ..................................................... 45 9 Pressure Gage ......................................... 25 6 Pressure Light .......................................... 25 7 Oil, Engine Oil Life Sys[...]

Parking Assist ....................................................... 22 2 Brake ....................................................... 15 6 Over Things That Burn ............................ 15 9 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 24 6 Passenger Sensing System ......................... 1 01 Passing ....................................................... 36 9 P ASS-Key ® III+ ........................................... 13 7 P ASS-Key ® III+ Operation ........................... 13 7 Power Door Locks .............................................. 12 3 Electrical System ..................................... 564 Liftgate ..................................................... 1[...]

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 34 8 Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 33 7 Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 54 Rear Side Window Antenna ......................... 35 4 Rear Storage Area ...................................... 192 Rear Windshield W asher/Wiper .................... 21 0 Rearview Mirror , Automatic Dimming with Compass and T emperature Display .......... 1 66 Rearview Mirror , Automatic Dimming with OnStar ® , Compass and T emperature Display ..................................................... 16 2 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 15 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 59 0 Recovery Hooks[...]

Safety Belts (cont.) Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ............................................ 42 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 5 6 Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 54 Right Front Passenger Position .................. 52 Safety Belt Extender .................................. 60 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 52 Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 38 Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 5 1 Safety W arnings and Symbols ......................... 4 Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 57 9 Seats 60/40 Split Bench Seat .............................. 20 Bucket Seats, Rear .............[...]

Split Bench Seat (60/40) ............................... 20 StabiliT rak ® System ..................................... 36 3 StabiliT rak ® Indicator Light ........................... 25 2 Starting Y our Engine ................................... 14 1 Steering ...................................................... 36 7 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 351 Steering Wheel, T ilt Wheel .......................... 20 4 Storage Areas Cargo Management System ..................... 194 Center Console Storage Area ................... 190 Cupholder(s) ............................................ 19 0 Glove Box ................................................ 19 0 Luggage Carrier ...[...]

Tires (cont.) Spare T ire ................................................ 55 2 Storing a Flat or Spare T ire and T ools ......... 54 7 T ire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 50 8 T ire T erminology and Definitions ............... 51 2 Uniform T ire Quality Grading .................... 52 7 Wheel Alignment and T ire Balance ........... 528 Wheel Replacement ................................. 52 8 When It Is T ime for New Tires ................. 5 23 T ow/Haul Mode ........................................... 14 9 T ow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 259 T owing Recreational V ehicle ................................. 4 18 T owing a Trailer ..................[...]

W W arning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 24 2 W arnings DIC W arnings and Messages ................... 270 Hazard W arning Flashers ......................... 2 04 Other W arning Devices ............................ 20 4 Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4 V ehicle Damage .......................................... 5 Wheels Alignment and T ire Balance ..................... 52 8 Different Size ........................................... 52 6 Replacement ............................................ 52 8 Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 72 Windows ..................................................... 13 2 Power ...............................[...]